LG 47LM8600,55LM8600 Brochure

‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺳﺮﻳﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ‬
‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻨﺪﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻝ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺳﺮﻳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻬﻢ ‪41‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮی‬
‫‪40‬‬
‫ﻣﻬﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺭﺯﻭﻟﻮﺷﻦ‬
‫ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ‬
‫ﺭﺯﻭﻟﻮﺷﻦ‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺯﻭﻟﻮﺷﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻬﻢ ‪39‬‬
‫ﻣﻬﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ‬
38
.‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‬RGB (PC) ‫ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬3 ‫ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬، WiDi ‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬3 ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ‬
(kHz)
2D to 3D, Side by Side(Half),
Top & Bottom,
Single Frame Sequential
50
37,50
60
45,00
2D to 3D, Side by Side(Half),
Top & Bottom
50
28,12
60
33,75
24
27,00
25
28,12
30
33,75
50
56,25
60
67,50
2D to 3D, Side by Side(Half),
Top & Bottom, Checker Board
2D to 3D, Side by Side(Half),
Top & Bottom, Checker Board,
Single Frame Sequential,
Row Interleaving, Column Interleaving
2D to 3D, Side by Side(Half),
Top & Bottom
2D to 3D
2D to 3D, Side by Side(Half),
Top & Bottom
2D to 3D
2D to 3D, Side by Side(Half),
Top & Bottom, Checker Board,
Row Interleaving, Column Interleaving
[Photo : Side by Side(Half),
Top & Bottom]
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩی‬
720p
2D to 3D, Side by Side(Half),
Top & Bottom
2D to 3D, Side by Side(Half),
Top & Bottom, Checker Board,
Single Frame Sequential,
Row Interleaving, Column Interleaving
2D to 3D
Signal
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻋﻤﻮﺩی‬
(Hz)
‫ ﺑﻌﺪی ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ‬3 ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ‬
1080i
HDMI-DTV
1080p
48,36
768x1024
47,71
768x1360
67,50
1080x1920
-
Others
48,36
768x1024
47,71
768x1360
67,50
1080x1920
Others
60
60
HDMI-PC
RGB-PC
-
-
50
37,50
60
45,00
50
28,12
60
33,75
24
27,00
25
28,12
30
33,75
50
56,25
60
67,50
-
-
Others
30
33,75
1080p
USB
30
33,75
1080p
DLNA
‫ ﺑﻌﺪی ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ‬3 ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ‬
Signal
2D to 3D, Side by Side(Half),
Top & Bottom
HD
2D to 3D
SD
720p
1080i
Composant
1080p
DTV
37 ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ‬
‫ ﺑﻌﺪی ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ‬3 ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
.‫ ﺑﻌﺪی ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬3 ‫• ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬3 ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ ﺑﻌﺪی ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ‬3 ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ‬
‫ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻋﻤﻮﺩی‬
(Hz)
‫ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ‬
(kHz)
Side by Side(Half), Top & Bottom,
Side by Side(Full)
31,5 / 31,469
Frame Packing, Line Alternative
63 / 62,938
Side by Side(Half), Top & Bottom,
Side by Side(Full)
60 / 59,94
31,5 / 31,469
Frame Packing, Line Alternative
Side by Side(Half), Top & Bottom,
Side by Side(Full)
Signal
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩی‬
480x640
480p
63 / 62,938
50
Frame Packing, Line Alternative
31,25
576p
62,5
50
37,50
60 / 59,94
45 / 44,96
50
75
60 / 59,94
90 / 89,91
50
28,125
60 / 59,94
33,75 / 33,72
50
56,25
60 / 59,94
67,50
23,97 / 24
27 / 26,97
25
28,125
30 / 29,976
33,75 / 33,72
24 / 23,97
54 / 43,94
25
56,25
30 / 29,976
67,5 / 67,432
50
56,25
59,94 / 60
67,5 / 67,432
Side by Side(Half), Top & Bottom,
Checker Board, MPO(Photo)
30
33,75
1080p
USB
Side by Side(Half), Top & Bottom,
Checker Board
30
33,75
1080p
DLNA
Side by Side(Half), Top & Bottom,
Side by Side(Full)
Frame packing, Line Alternative
Side by Side(Half), Top & Bottom,
Side by Side(Full)
Frame packing, Field Alternative
Side by Side(Half), Top & Bottom,
Side by Side(Full)
Frame packing, Line Alternative
Side by Side(Half), Top & Bottom
720p
HDMI
1080i
1080p
‫‪36‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪HDMI/DVI-DTV‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻮﻧﻨﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻓﻘﯽ)ﮐﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻮﺩی)ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻮﻧﻨﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪Y‬‬
‫‪PB‬‬
‫‪PR‬‬
‫‪480x720‬‬
‫‪31.469‬‬
‫‪31.5‬‬
‫‪59.94‬‬
‫‪60‬‬
‫ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪DVD‬‬
‫‪Y‬‬
‫‪PB‬‬
‫‪PR‬‬
‫‪576x720‬‬
‫‪31.25‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪Y‬‬
‫‪B-Y‬‬
‫‪R-Y‬‬
‫‪720x1280‬‬
‫‪37.5‬‬
‫‪44.96‬‬
‫‪45‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪59.94‬‬
‫‪60‬‬
‫‪Y‬‬
‫‪Cb‬‬
‫‪Cr‬‬
‫‪Y‬‬
‫‪Pb‬‬
‫‪Pr‬‬
‫‪1080x1920‬‬
‫‪33.72‬‬
‫‪33.75‬‬
‫‪28.125‬‬
‫‪26.97‬‬
‫‪27‬‬
‫‪33.716‬‬
‫‪33.75‬‬
‫‪56.25‬‬
‫‪67.43‬‬
‫‪67.5‬‬
‫‪59.94‬‬
‫‪60‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪23.97‬‬
‫‪24‬‬
‫‪29.976‬‬
‫‪30.00‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪59.94‬‬
‫‪60‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻮﻧﻨﺖ‬
‫‪480i/576i‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪480p/576p‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪720p/1080i‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪1080p‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫)‪ ٥٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪ ٦٠ /‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
35 ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻮگ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬
PAL/SECAM-B/G/D/K, PAL-I
DVB-T
BG : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
I : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
DK : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
PAL B/B
B/B : VHF/UHF 0 to 75, CATV : 2 to
44
PAL/SECAM-B/G/D/K, PAL-I, NTSC-M
BG : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
I : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
DK : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
M : VHF/UHF 2 to 78, CATV 01 to 71
PAL/SECAM-B/G/D/K, PAL-I, NTSC-M
BG : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
I : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
DK : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
M : VHF/UHF 2 to 78, CATV 01 to 71
PAL/SECAM-B/G/D/K, PAL-I, NTSC-M
BG : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
I : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
DK : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
M : VHF/UHF 2 to 78, CATV 01 to 71
UHF 21 to 69
DVB-T
VHF 06 to 12,
UHF 27 to 69
DVB-T
UHF 21 to 69
DVB-T
VHF 6 to 12,
UHF 21 to 69
DVB-T
VHF 5 to 12,
UHF 21 to 69
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
،‫ ﺍﺳﺮﺍﻳﻴﻞ‬،‫ﺍﻧﺪﻭﻧﺰی‬
‫ ﺳﺮﻳﻼﻧﻜﺎ‬،‫ﺑﺮﻣﻪ‬
‫ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ ﻣﺎﻟﺰی‬،‫ﻭﻳﺘﻨﺎﻡ‬
‫ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
،‫ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﻳﺮﻩ‬،‫ﺍﻳﺮﺍﻥ‬
‫ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬،‫ﺗﻮﻧﺲ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
-
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
BG : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
I : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
DK : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
M : VHF/UHF 2 to 78, CATV 01 to 71
-
‫ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
75 Ω
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﻟﻴﺎ‬
‫ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
PAL/SECAM-B/G/D/K, PAL-I, NTSC-M
75 Ω
‫ ﺳﻨﮕﺎﭘﻮﺭ‬،‫ﺯﻻﻧﺪﻧﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻣﭙﺪﺍﻧﺲ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﯽ‬
‫ ﻫﻨﺪﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ‬، ‫ﻣﺪﻝ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻮگ‬
‫ ﺁﻓﺮﻳﻘﺎی ﺟﻨﻮﺑﯽ‬، ‫ ﺗﺎﻳﻠﻨﺪ‬،
-- ،
‫‪34‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻋﺮﺽ ×‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﻃﻮﻝ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫ﻭﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺑﺮﻕ‬
‫‪47LM8600-TA / 47LM860Y-TA‬‬
‫‪55LM8600-TA / 55LM860Y-TA‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ(‬
‫‪263.0 x 701.0 x 1063.0‬‬
‫‪331.0 x 795.0 x 1232.0‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ(‬
‫‪33.4 x 628.0 x 1063.0‬‬
‫‪33.6 x 723.0 x 1232.0‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ(‬
‫‪18.0‬‬
‫‪25.9‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ(‬
‫‪15.8‬‬
‫‪22.2‬‬
‫‪AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz‬‬
‫‪AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻭ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺑﺮﻕ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫ﺩﻣﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ‬
‫ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺩﻣﺎی ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی‬
‫ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ ‪33‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﻭﺯﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫‪2400 to 2483,5 MHz‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﻣﻨﻪ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻭﻻﺳﻴﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺘﺎ‬
‫‪2400 to 2483,5 MHz: -0,79dBi‬‬
‫ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ‬
‫‪5150 to 5250 MHz: 0,62dBi‬‬
‫‪5725 to 5850 MHz: 0,52dBi‬‬
‫ﭘﻬﻨﺎی ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﺷﻐﺎﻟﯽ‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﺎژﻭﻝ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ )‪(BM-LDS302‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺍﻣﻨﻪ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ )ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ(‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺘﺎ )ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ(‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﺎژﻭﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ )‪(WN8122E‬‬
‫‪32‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ‪ /‬ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﻭ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‪،‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ‬
‫• ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺳﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ )ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﻭﺯ( ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪،‬ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﭘﻴﺸﮕﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻋﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﭘﺎﻙ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﻭ ﮐﺜﻴﻔﯽ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﺧﺸﻚ‪ ،‬ﻧﺮﻡ ﻭ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﭘﺎﻙ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﭘﺎﻙ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺜﻴﻔﯽ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺁﻏﺸﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺏ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻼﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺭﻗﻴﻖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺧﺸﻚ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﻠﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻧﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﺗﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻙ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻫﻞ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﻟﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺧﻂ ﻭ ﺧﺶ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻴﭽﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﭼﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﺁﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﺷﻴﺪﻥ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺳﻄﺢ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺁﺏ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی‪ ،‬ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﺁﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺜﻴﻔﯽ ﺗﺠﻤﻊ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺮﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻨﺴﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﻧﻌﯽ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ (‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ ) .‬ﺑﺎ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍﻳﯽ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺁﻳﺎ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻧﺎﮔﻬﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﯽ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ‪ 15‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ "ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻧﺎ ﻣﻌﺘﺒﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ" ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ‪ /‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ RGB/HDMI‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪31‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﮐﻤﻚ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺼﻞ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺮﺍﻣﻮﻥ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ HOME‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ User Guide‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ی ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪ ꕌ/ꕍ‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫• ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ )‪ (User Guide‬ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪HOME Settings OPTION Language‬‬
‫‪Selects Menu Language and Audio Language displayed on the screen.‬‬
‫‪Menu Language Selects a language for the display text.‬‬
‫]‪[In Digital Mode Only‬‬
‫‪Audio Language When watching a digital broadcast containing several audio‬‬
‫‪languages, you can select the language you want.‬‬
‫]‪[In Digital Mode Only‬‬
‫‪Use the Subtitle function when two or more subtitle languages‬‬
‫‪Subtitle‬‬
‫‪are broadcast.‬‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫‪✎ If subtitle data in a selected language is not broadcast, the‬‬
‫‪default language subtitle will be displayed.‬‬
‫‪Close‬‬
‫‪Zoom Out‬‬
‫‪Try Now‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪ ꕌ/ꕍ‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻮﭼﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪30‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻫﺎی )‪ 1.5‬ﻭﻟﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺠﻢ ‪ (AAA‬ﺑﺎ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻗﻄﺐ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺭﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ‬
‫• ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻫﺎی ﻧﻮ ﻭ ﮐﻬﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻣﯽ ﺑﻴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻮگ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﮐﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪POWER‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪User Guide‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪RATIO‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪INPUT‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV/RAD‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭ ‪ DTV‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪LIST‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Q.VIEW‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪INPUT‬‬
‫‪RATIO‬‬
‫‪TV /‬‬
‫‪RAD‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪Q.VIEW‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪LIST‬‬
‫‪FAV‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪G‬‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪MUTE‬‬
‫‪HOME MY APPS‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪FAV‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺗﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪MUTE‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪PAGE‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪SETTINGS‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫‪HOME‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﻣﺒﺪﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪MY APPS‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩی ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪..‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ‪ /‬ﭼﭗ ‪ /‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ(‬
‫) ﺑﺎﻻ ‪/‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪BACK‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪SETTINGS‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪GUIDE‬‬
‫‪SUBTITLE‬‬
‫‪Q.MENU‬‬
‫‪T.OPT‬‬
‫‪TEXT‬‬
‫‪LIVE TV‬‬
‫‪REC‬‬
‫‪ENERGY‬‬
‫‪INFO‬‬
‫‪SAVING‬‬
‫‪GUIDE‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﺭﻧﮕﯽ‬
‫ﺁﺑﯽ (‬
‫ﺯﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺳﺒﺰ‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫)‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎ ) ‪( TEXT T.OPT‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪SUBTITLE‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺯﻳﺮﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﺧﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Q.MENU‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪،‬ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪LIVE TV‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬
‫(‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ )‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍی ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ‪ DVR‬ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ‪ Smart Share‬ﻳﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ SIMPLINK‬ﺭﺍ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ USB‬ﻳﺎ ‪ SIMPLINK‬ﻳﺎ ‪(DVR‬‬
‫‪REC‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ DVR‬ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪INFO‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﻳﺖ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ‪.‬‬
‫‪ENERGY SAVING‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺍﻧﺮژی ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪SIMPLINK‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ‪ AV‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬
‫‪ HDMI‬ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ‪.HDMI-CEC‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ SIMPLINK‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ ‪29‬‬
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮓ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺛﺒﺖ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﺎﻣﻮﻓﻖ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺛﺒﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻣﺪﺕ ‪ 5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪ BACK‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ HOME‬ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻳﺴﺖ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﻃﺒﻖ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺛﺒﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺛﺒﺖ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺕ ‪ 5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ BACK‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺾ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺭﻳﺴﺖ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﭼﺸﻤﻚ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫«‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫«‬
‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻣﺤﻮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻴﻚ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻤﯽ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﺻﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﮕﻴﺮﺩ ﻣﺤﻮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﭼﭗ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﺕ‬
‫‪ 10‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺻﺒﺮ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ‬
‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ‪ My Apps‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻴﻚ‬
‫• ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺗﺎ ‪ 10‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺧﻄﺎی ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺧﻄﺎی ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﯽ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻗﯽ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﻣﺎﻳﻜﺮﻭﻓﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻬﻨﺎی ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ‬
‫)‪ 2/4‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﯽ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺰﻝ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻜﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻧﺼﺎﺏ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﭼﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩی ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻣﻮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﮐﺴﺲ ﭘﻮﻳﻨﺖ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ‪ 1‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﮐﺴﺲ ﭘﻮﻳﻨﺖ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ‪ 1‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻋﺎﺩی ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩﺍﺭ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪28‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ "‪".Magic Remote Control battery is low. Change the battery‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻫﺎی )‪ 1.5‬ﻭﻟﺖ ‪(AA‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﻄﺐ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺩﺭﺏ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺭﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻫﺎ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﻋﻜﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ‬
‫• ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻫﺎی ﻧﻮ ﻭ ﮐﻬﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻣﯽ ﺑﻴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ )ﻓﺮﺳﺘﻨﺪﻩ ‪(RF‬‬
‫‪)Voice Search‬ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ(‬
‫)ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ(‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪HOME‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫)‪Wheel(OK‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﭼﻬﺎﺭﺟﻬﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻣﺤﻮ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻳﻚ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻋﺎﺩی‬
‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪BACK‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺑﺎﺯﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﭼﻬﺎﺭﺟﻬﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻ (‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬
‫) ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﭼﭗ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪MUTE‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪)Voice Search‬ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ(‬
‫• ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺑﺘﺎ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺁﺭﺍﻡ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺮﺩﻩ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻣﯽ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ‪ 15‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪MY APPS‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩی ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ‪27‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫‪3 USB Apps‬‬
‫‪USB IN‬‬
‫‪1 HDD IN 2 USB‬‬
‫‪HDD‬‬
‫)ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ(‬
‫‪Hub‬‬
‫)ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ(‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫)ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ‪ USB‬ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﻓﻠﺶ ﻣﻤﻮﺭی‪،‬ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﺳﺨﺖ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺗﺨﻮﺍﻥ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ Smart share‬ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ‪ USB Hub‬ﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﮑﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫‪ USB‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ‪ USB Hub‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﻧﺒﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪26‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺻﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻮگ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻮﺯﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻮﻧﻨﺖ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫• ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎی ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮی ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﻫﺎی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺍﭘﺘﻴﻜﺎﻝ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬
‫‪IN‬‬
‫‪COMPONENT‬‬
‫‪PB‬‬
‫‪Y‬‬
‫‪PR‬‬
‫‪AV‬‬
‫‪AUDIO‬‬
‫‪VIDEO‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺍﭘﺘﻴﻜﺎﻝ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪OUT‬‬
‫‪OPTICAL‬‬
‫‪DIGITAL‬‬
‫‪AUDIO‬‬
‫ﺯﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺳﻔﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺳﻔﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺯﺭﺩ‬
‫)ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻮﺯﻳﺖ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺯﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫)ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ(‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺳﻔﻴﺪ‬
‫)ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ(‬
‫ﺯﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻮﺯﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫‪VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R‬‬
‫‪Blu-Ray / HD Cable Box /‬‬
‫‪DVD / VCR‬‬
‫• ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺍﭘﺘﻴﻜﺎﻝ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﻌﻪ ﻟﻴﺰﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﻴﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺯﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺻﺪﺍی ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ‪) ACP‬ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺍﺯ ﮐﭙﯽ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ( ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ‪25‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪RGB-PC‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻮﻧﻨﺖ‬
‫ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺻﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺻﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻮگ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻮﻧﻨﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫)‪(RGB/DVI‬‬
‫‪AUDIO‬‬
‫‪IN‬‬
‫)‪(PC‬‬
‫‪RGB‬‬
‫‪COMPONENT‬‬
‫‪Y‬‬
‫)ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ(‬
‫‪PB‬‬
‫‪PR‬‬
‫‪AV‬‬
‫‪AUDIO‬‬
‫)ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ(‬
‫ﺯﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺳﺒﺰ‬
‫)ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻮﺯﻳﺖ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫)ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻮﻧﻨﺖ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺳﺒﺰ‬
‫ﺳﺒﺰ‬
‫ﺳﺒﺰ‬
‫ﺁﺑﯽ‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺁﺑﯽ‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺁﺑﯽ‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺳﻔﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺳﻔﻴﺪ‬
‫‪RGB OUT (PC) AUDIO OUT‬‬
‫ﺯﺭﺩ‬
‫)ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ(‬
‫ﺳﻔﻴﺪ‬
‫‪PC‬‬
‫‪VIDEO‬‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫‪L‬‬
‫‪Blu-Ray‬‬
‫‪HD Cable Box‬‬
‫‪AUDIO‬‬
‫‪VIDEO‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺳﻴﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎی ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﺭﻳﺨﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪24‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ DVI‬ﺑﻪ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪MHL‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ‪ HDMI‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺗﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪4(MHL‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ DVI-HDMI‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺻﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ) MHL‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ High-definition‬ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ( ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫)‪4(MHL‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪/DVI IN‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪/DVI IN‬‬
‫)‪1(ARC‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫)‪1(ARC‬‬
‫)‪(RGB/DVI‬‬
‫‪AUDIO‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪MHL‬‬
‫)ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ(‬
‫)ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ(‬
‫)ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ(‬
‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫• ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ‪ MHL‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﭘﻠﻴﻜﻴﺸﻦ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪Blu-Ray / HD Cable Box /‬‬
‫‪DVD / PC‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫• ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻚ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﻪ ‪DVI‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ DOS‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ‪23‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫)‪4(MHL‬‬
‫• ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ‪ HDMI‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ Dolby Digital‬ﻭ ‪) PCM‬ﺣﺘﻰ ‪Up to 192‬‬
‫‪ ،32/44.1/48/88/96/176/192,DTS‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪/DVI IN‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫)‪1(ARC‬‬
‫)ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ(‬
‫‪Blu-Ray / HD Cable Box /‬‬
‫‪HD STB / DVD / PC‬‬
‫‪) ARC‬ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺻﺪﺍ(‬
‫• ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪ SIMPLINK‬ﻭ ‪ARC‬‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﭘﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺍﭘﺘﻴﮑﺎﻝ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ‪ SIMPLINK‬ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﻴﺎﺯی ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﭘﺘﻴﮑﺎﻝ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ‪ HDMI‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺗﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ HDMI‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﭘﺮﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ‪) CEC‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻜﯽ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺮﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ‬
‫‪1080p‬ﻭ ﺣﺘﯽ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍی ‪ DTV‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪:‬‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺁﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺮﺍﻣﻮﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫) ‪ 75‬ﺍﻫﻢ( ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ‪ :‬ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎی ‪ ، HD‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ‪ ، DVD‬ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ ﮐﺎﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫‪ ، USB‬ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﺯی ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﺮﻓﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ DVD‬ﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺳﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ DVD‬ﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ ﮐﺎﺳﺖ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﻨﺴﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺯی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﮐﻨﺴﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺯی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻮﻳﺰﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﮕﻮی‬
‫ﻋﻤﻮﺩی‪ ،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻳﺰ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺮﺥ ﺍﺣﻴﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻚ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ANTENNA / CABLE‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ‪ 2‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﭙﻴﻠﻴﺘﺮ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﻭ ﻣﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻫﻢ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻭ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ‪21‬‬
‫ﺟﻤﻊ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻤﻊ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﮔﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺴﺖ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻭ ﮔﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻧﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﭼﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺷﻜﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻭ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ‬
‫ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺕ ﻣﺎﻟﯽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺟﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺖ ﮐﻤﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺖ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻤﻊ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺴﺖ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪20‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻫﻢ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻭ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﻳﻚ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺠﺮﺏ ﻣﺸﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻝ ﺟﯽ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻧﺼﺎﺏ ﺣﺮﻓﻪ ﺍی‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪10‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺼﺐ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺳﻘﻒ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺭﻳﺐ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺍﻝ ﺟﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺳﻔﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﺳﺎﻗﻂ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪ VESA‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺕ ﻧﺎﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺳﺎﻗﻂ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪10‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
‫‪10‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫•‬
‫‪10‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪ .VESA‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﯾﻮﺍﺭی‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﺪﻝ‬
‫‪(B x A) VESA‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﭻ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی‬
‫‪400 x 400‬‬
‫‪M6‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪LSW400BX‬‬
‫‪LSW400BXG‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪VESA‬‬
‫ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻧﺼﺐ ﻭ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭی ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ )ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺧﻂ ﻭ ﺧﺶ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺛﺮ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ( ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺩﺭﺍﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﮐﻴﺴﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻣﻴﺰ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ(‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﺍﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﮐﻴﺴﻪ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﭘﺪﻫﺎی ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﺍﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻫﻢ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻭ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ‪19‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻣﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﻣﺪﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻣﻴﺰ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ‪ 10‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮی )ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ( ﺍﺯ‬‫ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫‪10‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪1‬ﺳﺎﻧ‬
‫ﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
‫‪10‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪10‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﯽ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﭼﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﻳﺪ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ‪ 10‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺩﻳﺪﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎی ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﻔﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﭘﺸﺖ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎی ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﺍی‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪،‬‬‫ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﺁﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻧﺼﺐ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی ﻭ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎی ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﺍی ﭘﺸﺖ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎی ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﺍی ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ‬
‫‪˚10‬‬
‫‪˚10‬‬
‫• ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻧﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺁﻭﻳﺰﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﺤﮑﻢ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻭ ﻗﺪﺭﺗﻤﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍﻛﺖ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺐ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﮔﻴﺮ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺣﺎﺩﺛﻪ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮ‬
‫‪18‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻫﻢ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻭ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪M4 x 20‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫ﭘﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ‬
‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ‬
‫• ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺳﻔﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪ ) .‬ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺳﻔﺖ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ(‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﺳﻔﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯﺣﺪ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻨﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻫﺮﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺷﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻫﻢ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻭ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ‪17‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﮐﻴﺴﻪ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ‬
‫‪M4 x 20‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ی ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎی ﺑﺎﻻ‬
‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺳﻮﺍﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﻜﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺑﺎﻟﺶ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻧﺮﻡ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺪﻭﺵ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪16‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻫﻢ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻭ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی‬
‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻧﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺨﺪﻭﺵ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺻﺮﻑ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ‪ 2‬ﻧﻔﺮ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ‬
‫• ﻫﻴﭽﮕﺎﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﻜﺴﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﻤﻞ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﺨﺪﻭﺵ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺍی‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ ﻳﺎ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﻧﮕﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﭘﻬﻠﻮ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺘﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‬
‫ﭘﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻫﻢ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻭ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ‪15‬‬
‫ﺍﺟﺰﺍ ﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪S‬‬
‫‪SETTINGS‬‬
‫‪INPUT‬‬
‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺁﺭﻡ ﺍﻝ ﺟﯽ‬
‫ﺣﺲ ﮔﺮﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺸﺮﻳﺢ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﭘﺮﻧﻮﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ ﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺣﺲ ﮔﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪ -‬ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫• ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪) OPTION‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ( ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪14‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻫﻢ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻭ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫« ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ‪ GND‬ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﺼﺐ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ‪ GND‬ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺣﺎﺩﺛﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫« ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﭘﺲ ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫« ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ‬
‫‪ANTENNA/‬‬
‫‪CABLE IN‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻳﻖ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ‪ /‬ﺁﻧﺘﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺖ ﺗﺎپ ﺑﺎﮐﺲ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺳﺮ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺟﻚ ﺍﻧﺘﻦ ﻭ ﺳﺮ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺖ ﺗﺎپ ﺑﺎﮐﺲ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻭﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﮐﻮﺍﮐﺴﻴﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺩﺍﻣﻨﻪ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫)ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﮔﺎﻟﻮﺍﻧﻴﻚ ﺑﻪ ‪ EN 60728-11‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ‪ ، RF‬ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻗﺪﺭی ﺍﻓﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩی ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﺍﺭی ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩی ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﺍﺭی ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪AN-MR300‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﻋﻴﻨﻚ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎی ‪ 3‬ﺑﻌﺪی‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﻋﻴﻨﻚ ﻫﺎی ‪Dual Play‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻳﺎ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻭ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺸﯽ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﻝ ﻭ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻫﻢ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻭ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ‪13‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ی ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬
‫)ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 17‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬
‫)ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 17‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬
‫‪M4 x 20, 8 EA‬‬
‫)ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 18 ،17‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫ﺑﺴﺖ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫)ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ(‬
‫)ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 21‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻮﺯﻳﺖ‬
‫)ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 26 ،25‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻮﻧﻨﺖ‬
‫)ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 25‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫ﻋﻴﻨﻚ ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎی ‪ 3‬ﺑﻌﺪی‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻴﻨﻚ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻭ‬
‫ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﻣﻘﺼﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻴﻨﻚ ﻫﺎی ‪Dual Play‬‬
‫)ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ(‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻼ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫)ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺎﻙ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻙ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻳﻖ‬
‫)ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ(‬
‫)ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 14‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ی ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ )‪(AA‬‬
‫)ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 28‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ‬
‫)‪(AAA‬‬
‫)ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 30‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ‪ /‬ﺳﺮﻫﻢ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻭ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﮐﻤﯽ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺑﺮﻕ‪،‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺟﻬﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺍﻧﺮژی ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺎﺭی ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻫﻢ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻭ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻦ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻦ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﺒﻮﺩ ﻫﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﮕﺎﻫﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﺍﺭی ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﮐﻤﯽ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ‬
‫• ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻗﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﻧﺎﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﻏﻴﺮﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﺤﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻃﻠﻖ ﻧﺎﺯﮐﯽ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻕ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﺪﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫• ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﻭﺯﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍی ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎی ‪ HDMI‬ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 10‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ 18‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻳﺎ ﻣﻤﻮﺭی ﺍﺳﺘﻴﻚ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ‪ USB‬ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪ USB 2.0‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫*)‪(A‬‬
‫‪mm 10‬‬
‫*)‪(B‬‬
‫‪mm 18‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ‪11‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺩﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺳﻦ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ‬
‫• ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ‪ /‬ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﺯﻳﺮ ‪ 5‬ﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬‫ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﺯﻳﺮ ‪ 10‬ﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺁﻥ ﮐﻪ ﻗﻮﻩ ﺑﻴﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺷﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺭﺷﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻴﺠﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬‫)ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪ :‬ﺳﻌﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺑﺰﻧﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻌﯽ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺮﻳﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ( ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺖ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﭼﺸﻢ ﺷﺎﻥ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺴﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺩﻳﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ‬‫ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺴﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺩﻳﺪ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻮﺟﻮﺍﻧﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺟﻮﺍﻧﺎﻥ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 19‬ﺳﺎﻝ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﮐﻨﺶ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺘﯽ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ‬‫ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺧﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺑﻜﺸﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﻦ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺟﻮﺍﻥ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻌﯽ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺗﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬‫ﺑﻨﺸﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻴﻨﻚ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﺍﺯ ﻋﻴﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻴﻨﻚ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎی ﻋﻴﻨﻚ ﻃﺒﯽ‪ ،‬ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺑﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻴﻨﻚ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻴﻨﻚ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺨﺪﻭﺵ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻋﻴﻨﻚ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎی ﮐﻢ ﻳﺎ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺁﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻴﻨﻚ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺷﻜﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﻣﺨﺪﻭﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﺗﻴﺰ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺁﻥ ﻧﻜﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫• ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺩﻳﺪ‬
‫ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﻭﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺍﺭﻳﺐ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱ‬‫ﻧﺎﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی‬
‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ‬
‫• ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﺯﺍی ﻫﺮ ‪ 1‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 5‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 15‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﻣﻨﺠﺮ‬‫ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﺩﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﮔﻴﺠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺧﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭی ﻫﺎی ﻣﺰﻣﻦ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻮﺭﻫﺎی ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﻏﻴﺮﻋﺎﺩی ﻳﺎ ﺣﻤﻼﺕ ﻧﺎﮔﻬﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺗﻬﻮﻉ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺭﺩﺍﺭ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ ‪ /‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭﻳﻬﺎی ﻣﺰﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺻﺮﻉ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭی ﻫﺎی ﻗﻠﺒﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩی ﮐﻪ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻏﻴﺮﻋﺎﺩی ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺑﻴﻨﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺎﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺮﺩﻣﻚ ﭼﺸﻢ‪ ،‬ﺿﻌﻒ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﻜﻤﺎﺗﻴﺴﻢ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻳﺪ ﻋﻤﻖ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺩﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺧﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻋﺎﺩی ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﻳﺪ ﭼﺸﻢ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﭼﭗ ﺗﺎﻥ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺩﻳﺪﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﺋﻤﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺧﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﻧﺎﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻢ ﺧﻮﺍﺑﯽ‪ ،‬ﭘﺮﮐﺎﺭی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺮﻃﺮﻑ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺣﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫« ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺗﺪﺍﻭﻡ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺰﺷﻚ ﻣﺸﻮﺭﺕ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﺋﻤﯽ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺳﺮﺩﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﭼﺸﻢ ﺩﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﮔﻴﺠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻬﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﺗﭙﺶ ﻗﻠﺐ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭی ﭼﺸﻢ‪،‬‬
‫‪-‬ﻧﺎﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺑﻴﻨﯽ‪ ،‬ﺧﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺫﻳﺖ ﭼﺸﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ‬
‫• ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻤﻊ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻴﻮﺏ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﮐﻤﯽ ﭼﺸﻤﻚ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻋﺎﺩی‬
‫ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻪ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻦ ﺁﻭﺭی ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ‪ 2‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 6‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺸﻜﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮕﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫)ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﺁﺑﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺒﺰ( ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎی ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮی ﺑﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺛﺎﻟﺚ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻟﻴﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﻮﺩﺕ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺩﻳﺪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ )ﭼﭗ ‪ /‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ‪ /‬ﺑﺎﻻ‬
‫‪ /‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ(‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺖ ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻳﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺏ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ )ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺁﺭﻡ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻮی ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺍی ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﯽ(ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺳﻮﺧﺘﮕﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﺤﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺳﺎﮐﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ )ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻝ ﺳﯽ ﺩی ‪2‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻼﺳﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ‪ 1‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ( ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ 4:3‬ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺛﺎﻟﺚ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻓﺘﺪ ﻭ ﺩﻟﻴﻠﯽ ﺑﺮ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺲ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﺗﺮﻕ ‪ :‬ﺻﺪﺍی ﺗﺮﻙ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻧﻘﺒﺎﺽ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺒﺴﺎﻁ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻣﺎ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻓﺘﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﺪﺍی ﻭﺯ ﻭﺯ ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ‪ /‬ﻫﻮﻡ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﻗﯽ ‪ :‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﺪﺍی‬
‫ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺎﻣﻴﻦ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮی ﺑﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫• ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﺍﻣﻮﺭ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﻨﻞ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﮔﺬﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ‪،‬ﭘﺎﺷﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺁﺏ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺭﺍﻥ ﻭ‬
‫ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪،‬ﭼﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺩﺍﻍ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺑﺮ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺛﺮی ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫• ﻫﺮ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮک ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻌﻴﻮﺏ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺠﻤﻊ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻙ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻻﺕ ﻓﻴﺰﻳﻜﯽ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺧﻢ ﺷﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﻟﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎ ﺷﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﻻی ﺩﺭﺏ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺎ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﺗﻴﺰ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﻧﺎﺧﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺨﺪﻭﺵ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﻣﺪﺗﯽ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻧﻴﺮﻭی ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺪﻭﺵ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺁﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﺷﻴﺪﻥ ﺁﺏ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻙ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺷﻮی‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻕ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩﺭﻭ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺯﺑﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺍﮐﺲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﺰﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ‪ ،‬ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪) .‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‪ ،‬ﭘﻮﺳﻴﺪﮔﯽ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺘﯽ(‬
‫• ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﻮﻳﻴﭻ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺩﺭﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻧﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮﻕ‪ ،‬ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻕ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻴﺮﻭی ﮐﻤﻜﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺮﺍﺣﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ‬
‫‪5~7 times‬‬
‫• ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﮐﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ 5‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 7‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺍﺭﻳﺐ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﺎﺭ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﻴﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻫﺎی ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﻌﻴﻮﺏ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻧﻮ ﻭ ﮐﻬﻨﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻭ ﻧﺸﺘﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻣﺎﻧﻌﯽ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺕ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻧﻮﺭﻫﺎی ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩی ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﻚ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻣﯽ ﭼﻮﻥ ﮐﻨﺴﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺯی ﺍﺯ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﺁﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺟﺮﺍﺣﺖ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ‪ /‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻴﻮﺏ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﭘﻴﺸﮕﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﻍ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻧﺼﺐ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫« ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ‪ 10‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫« ﺍﺯ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﻗﺪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻫﻮﺍ )ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﮐﺘﺎﺑﺨﺎﻧﻪ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻤﺪ( ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫« ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﻓﺮﺵ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫« ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺳﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﺴﺪﻭﺩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪) VESA‬ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﺍﺭی ﺷﻮﺩ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ )ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﺍﺭی ﺷﻮﺩ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮی ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﺠﺮﺏ ﻣﺸﻮﺭﺕ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬
‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﻫﻮﺍی ﻃﻮﻓﺎﻧﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻋﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﺸﺘﯽ ﮔﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻧﺰﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﺑﺮﺍﺛﺮ ﺟﺮﻗﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﻭ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺯﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫« ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫« ﻣﻌﻴﻮﺏ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫« ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫« ﺍﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﻮ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭﺩ ﻏﻴﺮﻋﺎﺩی ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﺠﻤﻊ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻙ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺗﻀﻌﻴﻒ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺸﺘﯽ‪ ،‬ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﻭ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﭘﺎﺷﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺁﺏ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻄﺮﺍﺕ ﺁﺏ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﺣﺎﻭی ﺁﺏ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ‬
‫ﮔﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ‬
‫• ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﯽ ﻭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻜﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﻧﺎﭘﺎﻳﺪﺍﺭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﻣﺮﺗﻌﺶ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺟﺎﻧﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻣﺎﺗﯽ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﺯ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺟﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺁﻭﻳﺰﺍﻥ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻭ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺟﺮﺍﺣﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Des‬‬
‫‪nt‬‬
‫‪icca‬‬
‫• ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺿﺪ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻴﺴﻪ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻫﺎی ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺿﺪ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎﻙ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻠﻌﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﯽ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺩﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺩﺭﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﻼﻭﻩ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺧﻔﮕﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺁﻭﻳﺰﺍﻥ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺟﺮﺍﺣﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻫﺎی ﮐﻬﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻌﺪﻭﻡ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺒﻠﻌﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻠﻌﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺰﺷﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﻫﺎﺩی ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺳﺮﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ(‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﺑﺮﺍﺛﺮ ﺑﯽ ﺩﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﻓﻠﺰی ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺳﻜﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻨﺠﺎﻕ ﺳﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﻭ ﮐﺒﺮﻳﺖ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺐ ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺟﺮﺍﺣﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﺷﻴﺪﻥ ﺁﺏ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ )ﺗﻴﻨﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻨﺰﻳﻦ( ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺁﺗﺶ‬
‫ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﺁﻥ ﻭ ﺟﺮﺍﺣﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﯽ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬
‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫• ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫« ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫« ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺣﻤﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫« ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﯽ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﯽ ﻫﻤﭽﻮﻥ ﺷﻮﻓﺎژ‪ ،‬ﺷﻮﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﯽ‪.‬‬
‫« ﺩﺭ ﺁﺷﭙﺰﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫« ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺭﺍﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺩ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫« ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﯽ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺣﺎﻭی ﺁﺏ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﮔﻠﺪﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮﺑﻪ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی‪ ،‬ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ‪ ،‬ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻙ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻗﻄﻊ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻧﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﻴﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺧﺸﻚ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻙ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪) .‬ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﯽ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺑﺨﺎﺭی ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻕ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻭ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺁﺏ ﺑﺎﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺟﺎﺭی ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺁﺏ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﺁﻥ ﻭ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﻴﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯﻫﺎی ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﭘﻴﺮﺍﻣﻮﻥ ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺭﻧﻤﺎی ‪ www.lg.com‬ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ HDMI‬ﻭ ﺁﺭﻡ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭ‪ High-Definition Multimedia Interface‬ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪HDMI Licensing LLC‬‬
‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ‪ DivX® :DIVX VIDEO‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺷﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﮐﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺎﺑﻌﻪ ﺻﻨﺎﻳﻊ ‪ .Rovi‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ‪ DivX‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ‪ DivX‬ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺭﻧﻤﺎی ‪ divx.com‬ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‪ :DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ ﺭﺳﻤﯽ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺧﺮﻳﺪﺍﺭی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﺪ ﺛﺒﺖ‪ ،‬ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬
‫‪ DivX VOD‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﻧﻤﺎی ‪ divx.com‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫" ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ®‪ DivX‬ﺗﺎ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ‪ HD 1080p‬ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍی ﻣﻤﺘﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺁﺭﻡ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺟﺰﻭ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ‪ Rovi Corporation‬ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫"ﺗﺤﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻳﮏ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺣﻖ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻣﺮﻳﮑﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻫﻬﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ‪:‬‬
‫‪"7,295,673;7,460,668;7,515,710;7,519,274‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺣﻖ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻣﺮﻳﮑﺎ ‪5,956,674;5,974,380;6,487,535 :‬‬
‫‪ ، DTS‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ‪DTS‬ﻭ ﻋﻼﻳﻢ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ‪ DTS 2.0+Digital Out‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ‪ © DTS,Inc‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺣﺎﻭی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ ‪ DTS,Inc‬ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﻴﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﺪ ‪ GPL‬ﻭ ‪ LGPL‬ﻭ ‪ MPL‬ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯﻫﺎی ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺭﻧﻤﺎی‬
‫‪ http://opensource.lge.com‬ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﮐﺪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺭﺩ ﺗﻌﻬﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﻴﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﭙﯽ ﺭﺍﻳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻝ ﺟﯽ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻜﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﻟﻮﺡ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺍی ﮐﺪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺗﺎﻣﻴﻦ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ )ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﻤﻞ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ(‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪ [email protected]‬ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ‪ 3‬ﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺧﺮﻳﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ ﻻﺑﺮﺍﺗﻮﺁﺭﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﻟﺒﯽ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ‪ Dolby‬ﻭ ‪ D‬ﺟﺰﻭ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﻻﺑﺮﺍﺗﻮﺁﺭﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﻟﺒﯽ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯﻫﺎ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﻴﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻫﻢ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻭ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫‪14‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫‪16‬‬
‫‪17‬‬
‫‪17‬‬
‫‪19‬‬
‫‪20‬‬
‫‪21‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩی ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﺍﺭی ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺟﺰﺍ ﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬‫ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻣﻴﺰ‬‫ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ‬‫‪ -‬ﺟﻤﻊ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫‪23‬‬
‫‪24‬‬
‫‪24‬‬
‫‪25‬‬
‫‪25‬‬
‫‪26‬‬
‫‪26‬‬
‫‪26‬‬
‫‪27‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ DVI‬ﺑﻪ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪MHL‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪RGB-PC‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻮﻧﻨﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻮﺯﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺍﭘﺘﻴﻜﺎﻝ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪USB‬‬
‫‪28‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ‬
‫‪29‬‬
‫‪29‬‬
‫‪29‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ‬
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ‬
‫‪30‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫‪31‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬
‫‪32‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی‬
‫‪32‬‬
‫‪32‬‬
‫‪32‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬‫‪ -‬ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ‬
‫‪32‬‬
‫ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ‬
‫‪33‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫‪39‬‬
‫ﻣﻬﻢ‬
‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﺎﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﺪﺕ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﺮگ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﺎﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﺍﺣﺖ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫• ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻜﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﮐﻤﻚ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻙ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﻜﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪LED LCD‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺑﻌﺪی ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫**‪LM86‬‬
‫‪www.lg.com‬‬